blob: d11f4e85c3d46ac30db41c672a36467c08eda48a [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
62 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc(
64 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
65
66static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
67 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
68 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000069
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000070static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000071 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
72 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000074static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
75 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
76 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000078static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
79 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
80 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
81 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
82 "predicated store"));
83
84static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
85 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
87 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
88
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000089static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
90 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
91 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
92 "executed"));
93
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000094static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
95 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
96 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
97 "speculatively executed instructions"));
98
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000099STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
101 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
102STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
103 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
104STATISTIC(
105 NumLookupTablesHoles,
106 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000107STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000108STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
109 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000110STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000111
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000112namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000113// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
114// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
115// cases composing the case group.
116typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000117 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000118// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
119// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
120// switch for that PHI.
121typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000123/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
124struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
125 ConstantInt *Value;
126 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000127
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
132 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
133 return Value < RHS.Value;
134 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000135
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
137};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000140 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000141 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000142 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000143 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000144 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
147 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000148 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000149 BasicBlock *Pred,
150 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000151 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
152 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000153
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000154 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000155 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000156 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
157 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000158 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000159 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000160 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000161 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
163 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000166 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000167 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
168 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
169 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
170 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
172};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000173}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000175/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000176/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000177static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 if (SI1 == SI2)
179 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000181 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
182 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
183 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
184 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
185 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000186 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000187
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000188 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
189 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
190 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000191 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
192 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
193 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
194 return false;
195 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000196
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000197 return true;
198}
199
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000200/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
201/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
202/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000203static bool
204isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
205 Instruction *Cond,
206 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
207 if (SI1 == SI2)
208 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000209 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
210
211 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000212 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000213 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
214 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
215 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
216 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000217 if (!Ci2)
218 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000219 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
220 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
221 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
222 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
223 return false;
224
225 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
226 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000227 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000228 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
229 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
230 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000231 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
232 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000233 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000234 return false;
235 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
236 }
237 return true;
238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
241/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
242/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
243/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000244static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
245 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000246 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
247 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000248
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000249 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000250 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000251 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000252}
253
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000254/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
255/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
256/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000257/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000258static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000259 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000260 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000261 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000262 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000263}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000264
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000265/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
266/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000267/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
268/// which works well enough for us.
269///
270/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000271/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
272/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
273/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
274/// set and true is returned.
275///
276/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
277/// Select whose cost is 2.
278///
279/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
280/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
281/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000282static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000283 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000284 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000285 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
286 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000287 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
288 // so limit the recursion depth.
289 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
290 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
291 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
292 return false;
293
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000294 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000295 if (!I) {
296 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
297 // can be executed unconditionally.
298 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
299 if (C->canTrap())
300 return false;
301 return true;
302 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000303 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000304
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000305 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000306 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000307 if (PBB == BB)
308 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000309
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000310 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
311 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000312 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
313 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000314 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000315 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000316
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000317 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
318 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 if (!AggressiveInsts)
320 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000321
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000322 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000323 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
324 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000325
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000326 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
327 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
328 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000329 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000330 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000331
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000332 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000333
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000334 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
335 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
336 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
337 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
338 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
339 // enabled further IR optimizations.
340 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
341 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000342 return false;
343
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000344 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
345 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000346
347 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
348 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000349 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000350 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
351 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 return false;
353 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
354 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000355 return true;
356}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000357
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000358/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000359/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000360static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000361 // Normal constant int.
362 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000363 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000364 return CI;
365
366 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
367 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000369
370 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
371 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
372 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
373
374 // IntToPtr const int.
375 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
376 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
377 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
378 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
379 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
380 return CI;
381 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000382 return cast<ConstantInt>(
383 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000384 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000385 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000386}
387
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000388namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000389
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000390/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
391/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
392/// structure.
393/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
394/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
395/// representing the different cases for the switch.
396/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
397/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
398/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
399/// fail.
400struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000401 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000402 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
403 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
404 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
405 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000406
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000407 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
409 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
410 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000411 }
412
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000414 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000415 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000416 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000417
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000418private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000419 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
420 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
421 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
423 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424 CompValue = NewVal;
425 return (CompValue != nullptr);
426 }
427
428 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
429 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
430 /// match depending on isEQ).
431 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
432 /// against is placed in CompValue.
433 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
434 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000435 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
437 ICmpInst *ICI;
438 ConstantInt *C;
439 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000440 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000441 return false;
442 }
443
444 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000445 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000446
447 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000448 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000450 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000451
452 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
453 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
454
455 /*
456 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
457 x : BITVECTOR(64);
458 y : BITVECTOR(64);
459 z : BITVECTOR(64);
460 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
461 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
462 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
463 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000464 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
465 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
466 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000467 */
468
469 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
470 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
471 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
472 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
473 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
474 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
475 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
476
477 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
478 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
479 //
480 // mask = (1 << z)
481 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
482 //
483 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
484 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
485
486 // Pattern match a special case:
487 /*
488 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
489 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
490 );
491 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000492 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000493 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
494 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000495 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000497 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000498 return false;
499
500 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000501 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000502 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
503 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000504 UsedICmps++;
505 return true;
506 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000507 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000508
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000509 // Pattern match a special case:
510 /*
511 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
512 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
513 );
514 */
515 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
516 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
517 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
518 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
519 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
520 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
521 return false;
522
523 Vals.push_back(C);
524 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
525 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
526 UsedICmps++;
527 return true;
528 }
529 }
530
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000532 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 return false;
534
535 UsedICmps++;
536 Vals.push_back(C);
537 return ICI->getOperand(0);
538 }
539
540 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000541 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
542 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543
544 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
545 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
546 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000547 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
548 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
550 }
551
552 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
553 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
554 // x != 0 && x != 1.
555 if (!isEQ)
556 Span = Span.inverse();
557
558 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
559 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
560 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000561 }
562
563 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000564 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000565 return false;
566
567 // Add all values from the range to the set
568 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
569 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000570
571 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000572 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000573 }
574
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000575 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
577 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
578 /// vector.
579 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000580 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000581 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
582 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000583
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
585 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000586 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000587
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000588 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000589 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000591
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000592 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000593 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000594
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000595 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
596 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
597 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000598 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
599 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
600 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
601 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000602 continue;
603 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000604
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000606 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000607 // Match succeed, continue the loop
608 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000609 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000610
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
612 // comparison against the same value as the others.
613 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
614 if (!Extra) {
615 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000616 continue;
617 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000618 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
619 CompValue = nullptr;
620 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000621 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000622 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000624}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000625
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000626static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000627 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000628 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
629 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
630 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
631 if (BI->isConditional())
632 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000633 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
634 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000635 }
636
637 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000638 if (Cond)
639 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000640}
641
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000642/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000643/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000644Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000645 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000646 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
647 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
648 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000649 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
650 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
651 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000652 CV = SI->getCondition();
653 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000654 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000655 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000656 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000657 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000658 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000659
660 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000661 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000662 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
663 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000664 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000665 CV = Ptr;
666 }
667 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000668 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000669}
670
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000671/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000672/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000673BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
674 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000675 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000676 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000677 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
678 ++i)
679 Cases.push_back(
680 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000681 return SI->getDefaultDest();
682 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000683
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000684 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000685 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000686 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000687 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
688 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000689 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690}
691
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000692/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000693/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000694static void
695EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
696 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000697 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000698}
699
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000700/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000701static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
702 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000703 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
704
705 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
706 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
707 std::swap(V1, V2);
708
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000709 if (V1->size() == 0)
710 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000711 if (V1->size() == 1) {
712 // Just scan V2.
713 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
714 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
715 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
716 return true;
717 }
718
719 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
720 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
721 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
722 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
723 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
724 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
725 return true;
726 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
727 ++i1;
728 else
729 ++i2;
730 }
731 return false;
732}
733
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000734/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
735/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
736/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
737/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
738/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000739bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
740 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000741 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000742 if (!PredVal)
743 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000744
745 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
746 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000747 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
748 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000749
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000750 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
751 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
752
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000753 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000754 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000755 BasicBlock *PredDef =
756 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
757 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000758
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000759 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000761 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000762 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000763
764 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
765 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
766 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
767 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
768 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
769 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000770 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000771 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000772
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000773 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
774 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
775 // uncond br.
776 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
777 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000778 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000779 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000780
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000781 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000782 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000783
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000784 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000785 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
786 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000787
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000788 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
789 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000790 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000791
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000792 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
793 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000794 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000795 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
796 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000798 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000799 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000800
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000801 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
802 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000803 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000804 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
805 if (HasWeight)
806 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
807 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000808 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000809 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
810 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000811 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
812 --i;
813 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000814 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000816 Weights.pop_back();
817 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000818 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
819 SI->removeCase(i);
820 }
821 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000822 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000823 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000824 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
825 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000826
827 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000828 return true;
829 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000830
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000831 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
832 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000833 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000835 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
836 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000837 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000838 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000839 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
840 }
841 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000842
843 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
844 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000845 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
847 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
848 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
849 break;
850 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000851
852 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000853 if (!TheRealDest)
854 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000855
856 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
857 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000858 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
859 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
860 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000861 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000862 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000863
864 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000865 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000866 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867
868 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000869 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
870 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000871
872 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
873 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000874}
875
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000876namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000877/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
878/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
879/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
880struct ConstantIntOrdering {
881 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
882 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
883 }
884};
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000885}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000886
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000887static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
888 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
889 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
890 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000891 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000892 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000893 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000894}
895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000896static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000897 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000898 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000899 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000900 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
901
902 return false;
903}
904
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000905/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
906/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
907/// metadata.
908static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
909 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000910 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911 assert(MD);
912 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000913 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000914 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000915 }
916
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000917 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
918 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
919 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000920 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000921 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
922 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
923 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
924 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000925 }
926}
927
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000928/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000929static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000930 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
931 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
932 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
933 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
934 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000935 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000936}
937
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000938/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
939/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000940/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
941/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000942bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
943 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000944 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000945 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000946 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
947 bool Changed = false;
948
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000949 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000950 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000951 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000952
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000953 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
954 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000955 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956
957 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
958 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000959 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000960 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
961
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000962 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000963 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
964
965 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
966 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
967 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000968 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000969
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000970 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
971 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000972 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
973 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
974
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000975 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000976 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000977 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000978 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
979 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
980 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000981 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
982 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
983 // successor's weights
984 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000985
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000986 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000987 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000988 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000989 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000990 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
991 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
992 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000993 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000994
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000995 if (PredDefault == BB) {
996 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
997 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000998 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000999 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1000 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1001 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1002 else {
1003 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1004 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001005
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001006 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1007 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001008 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1009 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001010 Weights.pop_back();
1011 }
1012
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001013 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001014 --i;
1015 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001016 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001017
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001018 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1020 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1021 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1022 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1023 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001024
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001025 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1026 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001027 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1028 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1029 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1030 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1031 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001032 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1033 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1034 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1035 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001036 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1037 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001038 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001039 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001041 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1042 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1043 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1044 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1045 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1046 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1047 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1048 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001049 } else {
1050 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1051 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1052 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001053 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1054 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001055 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1056 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1057 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001058
1059 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001060 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1061 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001062 Weights.pop_back();
1063 }
1064
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001065 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1066 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001067 --i;
1068 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001069 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001070
1071 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1072 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001073 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1074 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1075 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001076 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1077 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001078 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1079 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001080 PTIHandled.erase(
1081 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001082 }
1083
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001084 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1085 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001086 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001087 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001088 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1089 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001090 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001091 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001092 }
1093
1094 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1095 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1096 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001097 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1098 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001099
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001100 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001101 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001102 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001103 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001104 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001105 }
1106
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001107 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001108 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1109 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001110 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001111 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1112 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001113
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001114 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1115 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1116 FitWeights(Weights);
1117
1118 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1119
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001120 NewSI->setMetadata(
1121 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1122 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001123 }
1124
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001125 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001126
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001127 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1128 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1129 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001130 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001131 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1132 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001133 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001134 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001135 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001136 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1137 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001138 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001139 }
1140 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1141 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001142
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001143 Changed = true;
1144 }
1145 }
1146 return Changed;
1147}
1148
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001149// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1150// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1151// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001152static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1153 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001154 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001155 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001156 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001157 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1158 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1159 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001160 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001161 return false;
1162 }
1163 }
1164 }
1165 return true;
1166}
1167
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001168static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1169
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001170/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1171/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1172/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001173static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001174 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001175 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1176 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1177 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1178 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1179 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001180 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1181 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001182
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001183 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1184 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1185
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001186 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001187 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1188 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1189 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1190 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1191 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001192 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001193 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001194 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001195 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001196 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001197 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001198 return false;
1199
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001200 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001201
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001202 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001203 do {
1204 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1205 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1206 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1207 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001208
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001209 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1210 return Changed;
1211
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001212 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1213 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1214 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001215 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001216 if (!I2->use_empty())
1217 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001218 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001219 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1220 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1221 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1222 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1223 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1224 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1225 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1226 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1227 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1228 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001229 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001230 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001231 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001232
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001233 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1234 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001235 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1236 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1237 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1238 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1239 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001240 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001241 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001242 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001243 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001244 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245
1246 return true;
1247
1248HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001249 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1250 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001251 return Changed;
1252
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001253 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001254 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001255 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001256 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1257 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1258 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1259 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1260 continue;
1261
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001262 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1263 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1264 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1265 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001266 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001267
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001268 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001269 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001270 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001271 return Changed;
1272 }
1273 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001274
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001275 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001276 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001277 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001278 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001279 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1280 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001281 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001282 }
1283
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001284 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001285 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1286 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1287 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1288 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001289 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001290 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001291 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001292 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001293 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001294 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1295 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001296 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1297 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001298
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001299 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1300 // that determines the right value.
1301 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001302 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001303 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1304 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1305 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001306
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001307 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1308 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1309 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1310 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001311 }
1312 }
1313
1314 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001315 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1316 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001317
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001318 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001319 return true;
1320}
1321
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001322// Return true if V0 and V1 are equivalent. This handles the obvious cases
1323// where V0 == V1 and V0 and V1 are both identical instructions, but also
1324// handles loads and stores with identical operands.
1325//
1326// Because determining if two memory instructions are equivalent
1327// depends on control flow, the \c At0 and \c At1 parameters specify a
1328// location for the query. This function is essentially answering the
1329// query "If V0 were moved to At0, and V1 were moved to At1, are V0 and V1
1330// equivalent?". In practice this means checking that moving V0 to At0
1331// doesn't cross any other memory instructions.
1332static bool areValuesTriviallySame(Value *V0, BasicBlock::const_iterator At0,
1333 Value *V1, BasicBlock::const_iterator At1) {
1334 if (V0 == V1)
1335 return true;
1336
1337 // Also check for instructions that are identical but not pointer-identical.
1338 // This can include load instructions that haven't been CSE'd.
1339 if (!isa<Instruction>(V0) || !isa<Instruction>(V1))
1340 return false;
1341 const auto *I0 = cast<Instruction>(V0);
1342 const auto *I1 = cast<Instruction>(V1);
1343 if (!I0->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I1))
1344 return false;
1345
1346 if (!I0->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
1347 return true;
1348
1349 // Instructions that may read or write memory have extra restrictions. We
1350 // must ensure we don't treat %a and %b as equivalent in code such as:
1351 //
1352 // %a = load %x
1353 // store %x, 1
1354 // if (%c) {
1355 // %b = load %x
1356 // %d = add %b, 1
1357 // } else {
1358 // %d = add %a, 1
1359 // }
1360
1361 // Be conservative. We don't want to search the entire CFG between def
1362 // and use; if the def isn't in the same block as the use just bail.
1363 if (I0->getParent() != At0->getParent() ||
1364 I1->getParent() != At1->getParent())
1365 return false;
1366
1367 // Again, be super conservative. Ideally we'd be able to query AliasAnalysis
1368 // but we currently don't have that available.
1369 auto WritesMemory = [](const Instruction &I) {
1370 return I.mayReadOrWriteMemory();
1371 };
1372 if (std::any_of(std::next(I0->getIterator()), At0, WritesMemory))
1373 return false;
1374 if (std::any_of(std::next(I1->getIterator()), At1, WritesMemory))
1375 return false;
1376 return true;
1377}
1378
1379// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1380// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1381static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1382 unsigned OpIdx) {
1383 // Early exit.
1384 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1385 return true;
1386
1387 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1388 default:
1389 return true;
1390 case Instruction::Call:
1391 case Instruction::Invoke:
1392 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1393 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1394 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
1395 return !isa<IntrinsicInst>(I);
1396 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1397 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1398 return OpIdx != 2;
1399 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1400 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1401 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1402 return OpIdx == 0;
1403 case Instruction::Alloca:
1404 return false;
1405 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1406 if (OpIdx == 0)
1407 return true;
1408 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
1409 return !It->isStructTy();
1410 }
1411}
1412
1413// All blocks in Blocks unconditionally jump to a common successor. Analyze
1414// the last non-terminator instruction in each block and return true if it would
1415// be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1416// instruction instead. Set NumPHIsRequired to the number of PHI nodes that
1417// would need to be created during sinking.
1418static bool canSinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks,
1419 unsigned &NumPHIsRequired) {
1420 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1421 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1422 if (BB->getTerminator() == &BB->front())
1423 // Block was empty.
1424 return false;
1425 Insts.push_back(BB->getTerminator()->getPrevNode());
1426 }
1427
1428 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1429 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1430 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1431 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1432 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1433 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1434 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1435 return false;
1436 // Apart from loads and stores, we won't move anything that could
1437 // change memory or have sideeffects.
1438 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !isa<LoadInst>(I) &&
1439 (I->mayHaveSideEffects() || I->mayHaveSideEffects()))
1440 return false;
1441 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1442 // have no uses.
1443 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1444 return false;
1445 }
1446
1447 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1448 for (auto *I : Insts)
1449 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1450 return false;
1451
1452 // If this isn't a store, check the only user is a single PHI.
1453 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1454 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1455 if (!PNUse ||
1456 !all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) {
1457 return *I->user_begin() == PNUse;
1458 }))
1459 return false;
1460 }
1461
1462 NumPHIsRequired = 0;
1463 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1464 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1465 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1466 return false;
1467 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
1468 return areValuesTriviallySame(I->getOperand(OI), I->getIterator(),
1469 I0->getOperand(OI), I0->getIterator());
1470 };
1471 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1472 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1473 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1474 return false;
1475 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI != 0)
1476 // Don't create indirect calls!
1477 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1478 return false;
1479 ++NumPHIsRequired;
1480 }
1481 }
1482 return true;
1483}
1484
1485// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1486// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1487// into one instruction.
1488static void sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
1489 unsigned Dummy;
1490 (void)Dummy;
1491 assert(canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks, Dummy) &&
1492 "Must analyze before transforming!");
1493 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1494
1495 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1496 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1497 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1498 for (auto *BB : Blocks)
1499 Insts.push_back(BB->getTerminator()->getPrevNode());
1500
1501 // We don't need to do any checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should have
1502 // done it all for us.
1503 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1504 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1505 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1506 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1507 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1508 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1509 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1510 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1511 // small mess we may make.
1512 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1513 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1514 });
1515 if (!NeedPHI) {
1516 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1517 continue;
1518 }
1519
1520 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1521 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1522 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1523 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1524 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1525 for (auto *I : Insts)
1526 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1527 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1528 }
1529
1530 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1531 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1532 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1533 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1534 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1535
1536 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1537 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1538 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1539 // instruction and nuke it.
1540 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1541 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1542 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1543 PN->eraseFromParent();
1544 }
1545
1546 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1547 for (auto *I : Insts)
1548 if (I != I0)
1549 I->eraseFromParent();
1550}
1551
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001552/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001553/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1554/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1555/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1556static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1557 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001558 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1559
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001560 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> Blocks;
1561 for (auto *BB : predecessors(BBEnd))
1562 Blocks.push_back(BB);
1563 if (Blocks.size() != 2 ||
1564 !all_of(Blocks, [](const BasicBlock *BB) {
1565 auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
1566 return BI && BI->isUnconditional();
1567 }))
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001568 return false;
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001569
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001570 bool Changed = false;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001571 unsigned NumPHIsToInsert;
1572 while (canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks, NumPHIsToInsert) && NumPHIsToInsert <= 1) {
1573 sinkLastInstruction(Blocks);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001574 NumSinkCommons++;
1575 Changed = true;
1576 }
1577 return Changed;
1578}
1579
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001580/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1581/// conditional block.
1582///
1583/// We are looking for code like the following:
1584/// BrBB:
1585/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1586/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1587/// ... // function).
1588/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1589/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1590/// ThenBB:
1591/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1592/// br label EndBB
1593/// EndBB:
1594/// ...
1595/// We are going to transform this into:
1596/// BrBB:
1597/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1598/// ... //
1599/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1600/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1601/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1602/// ...
1603///
1604/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1605/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001606static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1607 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001608 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1609 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001610 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001611
1612 // Volatile or atomic.
1613 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001614 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001615
1616 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1617
1618 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001619 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001620 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1621 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1622 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001623 // Skip debug info.
1624 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1625 continue;
1626 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001627
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001628 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001629 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001630 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001631
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001632 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1633 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1634 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1635 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1636 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001637 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001638 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001639 }
1640
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001641 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001642}
1643
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001644/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001645///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001646/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1647/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1648/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1649/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1650/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1651///
1652/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1653/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1654/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1655/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1656///
1657///
1658/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1659/// \code
1660/// BB:
1661/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1662/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1663/// ThenBB:
1664/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001665/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001666/// EndBB:
1667/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1668/// ...
1669/// \endcode
1670///
1671/// Into this IR:
1672/// \code
1673/// BB:
1674/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1675/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1676/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1677/// ...
1678/// \endcode
1679///
1680/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001681static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001682 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001683 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1684 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1685 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1686 return false;
1687
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001688 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1689 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1690
1691 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1692 // to swap the select operands later.
1693 bool Invert = false;
1694 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1695 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1696 Invert = true;
1697 }
1698 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1699
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001700 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1701 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1702 // - They are defined in BB, and
1703 // - They have no side effects, and
1704 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1705 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1706
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001707 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001708 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1709 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001710 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001711 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001712 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001713 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001714 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001715 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1716 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001717
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001718 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001719 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001720 ++SpeculationCost;
1721 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001722 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001723
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001724 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001725 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1726 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1727 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001728 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001729 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001730 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1731 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001732 return false;
1733
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001734 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1735 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1736 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1737
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001738 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001739 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001740 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001741 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001742 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001743 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001744 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1745
1746 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001747 }
1748 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001749
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001750 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1751 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1752 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001753 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1754 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1755 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001756 I != E; ++I)
1757 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001758 ++SpeculationCost;
1759 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001760 return false;
1761 }
1762
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001763 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1764 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001765 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001766 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001767 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1768 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001769
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001770 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001771 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001772 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001773 continue;
1774
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001775 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1776 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1777 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1778 return false;
1779
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001780 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001781 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1782 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1783 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001784 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1785
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001786 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1787 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001788 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001789 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1790 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001791 unsigned MaxCost =
1792 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001793 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001794 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001795
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001796 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1797 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1798 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001799 // constant expression.
1800 ++SpeculationCost;
1801 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001802 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001803 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001804
1805 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1806 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001807 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001808 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001809
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001810 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001811 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001812
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001813 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1814 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001815 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001816 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1817 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1818 if (Invert)
1819 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00001820 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
1821 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001822 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1823 }
1824
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001825 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1826 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001827 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001828 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1829
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001830 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001831 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1832 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001833
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001834 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001835 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001836 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1837 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1838 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1839 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1840 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1841 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1842
1843 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1844 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1845 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001846
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001847 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001848 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1849 // destinations were inverted.
1850 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001851 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001852 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00001853 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
1854 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001855 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1856 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001857 }
1858
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001859 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001860 return true;
1861}
1862
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001863/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001864static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1865 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001866 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001867
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001868 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001869 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1870 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001871 if (Size > 10)
1872 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001873 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001874
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001875 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001876 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001877 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1878 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001879 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
1880 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001881 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001882
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001883 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1884 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001885
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001886 return true;
1887}
1888
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001889/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1890/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1891/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001892static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001893 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1894 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001895 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1896 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001897 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1898 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001899
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001900 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1901 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001902 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001903 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001904 }
1905
1906 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001907 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
1908 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001909
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001910 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00001911 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001912 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1913 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1914 }))
1915 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001916
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001917 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1918 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001919 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001920 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001921 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
1922 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001923
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001924 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1925 // branch to RealDest.
1926 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1927 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001928
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001929 if (RealDest == BB)
1930 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001931 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001932 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
1933 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001934
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001935 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1936 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1937 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1938 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001939 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
1940 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
1941 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001942 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001943
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001944 // Update PHI nodes.
1945 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001946
1947 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1948 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1949 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1950 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001951 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001952 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1953 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1954 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1955 continue;
1956 }
1957 // Clone the instruction.
1958 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001959 if (BBI->hasName())
1960 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001961
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001962 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001963 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
1964 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001965 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1966 *i = PI->second;
1967 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001968
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001969 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001970 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001971 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1972 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
1973 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
1974 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
1975 N = nullptr;
1976 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001977 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001978 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001979 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001980 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001981 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1982 if (N)
1983 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001984 }
1985
1986 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1987 // to EdgeBB instead.
1988 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1989 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1990 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1991 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1992 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1993 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001994
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001995 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001996 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001997 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001998
1999 return false;
2000}
2001
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002002/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2003/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002004static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2005 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002006 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2007 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2008 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2009 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2010 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2011 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002012 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2013 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2014 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002015 if (!IfCond ||
2016 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2017 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2018 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002019
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002020 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2021 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2022 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2023 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2024 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2025 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2026 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2027 if (NumPhis > 2)
2028 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002029
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002030 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2031 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2032 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002033 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002034 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2035 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002036 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2037 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002038
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002039 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2040 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002041 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002042 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002043 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002044 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002045 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002046
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002047 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002048 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002049 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002050 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002051 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002052 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002053
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002054 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002055 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2056 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002057 if (!PN)
2058 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002059
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002060 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2061 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2062 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2063 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2064 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2065 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2066 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002067
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002068 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2069 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2070 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2071 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002072 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002073 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2074 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2075 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002076 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002077 } else {
2078 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002079 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2080 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002081 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002082 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002083 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2084 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002085 return false;
2086 }
2087 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002088
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002089 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002090 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002091 } else {
2092 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002093 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2094 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002095 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002096 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002097 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2098 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002099 return false;
2100 }
2101 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002102
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002103 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002104 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002105
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002106 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2107 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002108 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002109 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002110
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002111 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2112 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002113 if (IfBlock1)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002114 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002115 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002116 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002117 if (IfBlock2)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002118 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002119 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002120 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002121
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002122 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2123 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002124 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002125 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002126
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002127 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2128 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2129 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002130 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002131 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002132
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002133 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2134 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2135 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2136 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002137 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2138 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002139 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002140 return true;
2141}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002142
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002143/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2144/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002145/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002146static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002147 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002148 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2149 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2150 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2151 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2152 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002153
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002154 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2155 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2156 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002157 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002158 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002159 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002160 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002161
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002162 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002163 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2164 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2165 // branch into a return.
2166 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2167 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2168 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002169 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002170 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002171 return true;
2172 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002173
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002174 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2175 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2176 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2177 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002178
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002179 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2180 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2181 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2182 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2183 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2184 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2185 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002186
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002187 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2188 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2189 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2190 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2191 // safe.
2192 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2193 if (TCV->canTrap())
2194 return false;
2195 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2196 if (FCV->canTrap())
2197 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002198
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002199 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2200 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2201 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2202 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002203
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002204 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2205 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002206 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002207 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002208 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2209 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2210 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2211 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002212 TrueValue =
2213 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002214 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002215 }
2216
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002217 Value *RI =
2218 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002219
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002220 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002221
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002222 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002223 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002224 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002225
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002226 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2227
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002228 return true;
2229}
2230
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002231/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002232/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002233static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002234 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2235 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002236 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2237 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002238 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2239 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2240 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2241 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2242 return true;
2243 }
2244 }
2245 return false;
2246}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002247
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002248/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2249/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2250/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2251static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2252 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2253 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2254 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2255 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2256 bool PredHasWeights =
2257 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2258 bool SuccHasWeights =
2259 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2260 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2261 if (!PredHasWeights)
2262 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2263 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2264 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2265 return true;
2266 } else {
2267 return false;
2268 }
2269}
2270
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002271/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2272/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2273/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002274bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002275 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002276
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002277 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002278 if (BI->isConditional())
2279 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2280 else {
2281 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2282 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2283 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2284 // predecessor.
2285 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2286 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2287 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2288 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2289 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002290 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002291 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002292 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2293 Cond = Curr;
2294 break;
2295 }
2296 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2297 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2298 return false;
2299 }
2300 }
2301
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002302 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002303 return false;
2304 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002305
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002306 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2307 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002308 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002309
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002310 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002311 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002312
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002313 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002314 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2315 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002316
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002317 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002318 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002319
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002320 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2321 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2322 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2323 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2324 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2325 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002326 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002327 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2328 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2329 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002330 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002331 return false;
2332 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2333 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2334 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2335 return false;
2336 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2337 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2338 // and Cond.
2339 ++NumBonusInsts;
2340 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2341 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2342 return false;
2343 }
2344
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002345 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2346 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2347 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2348 if (CE->canTrap())
2349 return false;
2350 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2351 if (CE->canTrap())
2352 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002353
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002354 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002355 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002356 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002357 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2358 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002359
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002360 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2361 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002362 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002363
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002364 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2365 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2366 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002367 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002368 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002369 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002370 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2371 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002372 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002373
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002374 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002375 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002376 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002377
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002378 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002379 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002380 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002381 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002382 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002383 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2384 Opc = Instruction::And;
2385 InvertPredCond = true;
2386 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2387 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2388 InvertPredCond = true;
2389 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002390 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002391 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002392 } else {
2393 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2394 continue;
2395 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002396
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002397 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002398 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002399
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002400 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2401 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002402 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002403
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002404 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2405 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2406 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2407 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002408 NewCond =
2409 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002410 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002411
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002412 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002413 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002414 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002415
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002416 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002417 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002418 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2419 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2420 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002421 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002422 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002423 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002424 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2425 continue;
2426 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2427 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002428 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002429 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002430
2431 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2432 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2433 // only given the branch precondition.
2434 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2435 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002436 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002437
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002438 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2439 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002440 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002441 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002442
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002443 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2444 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002445 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002446 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002447 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002448 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002449 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002450 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002451
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002452 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002453 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2454 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002455 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2456
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002457 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002458 bool HasWeights =
2459 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2460 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002461 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2462
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002463 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002464 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002465 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2466 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002467 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002468 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002469 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002470 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2471 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2472 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002473 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2474 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2475 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002476 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002477 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2478 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2479 }
2480 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002481 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002482 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2483 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002484 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002485 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002486 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2487 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2488 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2489 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002490 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2491 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002492 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2493 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2494 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002495 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2496 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2497 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2498
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002499 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2500 NewWeights.end());
2501 PBI->setMetadata(
2502 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2503 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002504 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002505 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002506 } else {
2507 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2508 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002509 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002510 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002511 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002512 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002513 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2514 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2515 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2516 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002517 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2518 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2519 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2520 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002521 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002522 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2523 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002524 } else {
2525 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2526 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2527 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002528 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2529 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002530 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002531 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2532 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2533 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2534 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002535 }
2536 }
2537 // Update PHI Node.
2538 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2539 MergedCond);
2540 }
2541 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2542 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2543 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2544 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002545 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002546
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002547 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2548 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2549
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002550 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002551 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2552 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2553 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002554
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002555 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002556 }
2557 return false;
2558}
2559
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002560// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2561// nullptr.
2562static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2563 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2564 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2565 if (!BB)
2566 continue;
2567 for (auto &I : *BB)
2568 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2569 if (S)
2570 // Multiple stores seen.
2571 return nullptr;
2572 else
2573 S = SI;
2574 }
2575 }
2576 return S;
2577}
2578
2579static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2580 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2581 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2582 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2583 //
2584 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2585 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2586 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2587 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2588 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2589 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2590 // one.
2591 //
2592 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2593 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2594 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2595 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2596 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002597
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002598 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2599 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2600 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2601 if (!AlternativeV)
2602 break;
2603
2604 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2605 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2606 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2607 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2608 break;
2609 PHI = nullptr;
2610 }
2611 if (PHI)
2612 return PHI;
2613
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002614 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2615 if (!AlternativeV &&
2616 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2617 return V;
2618
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002619 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002620 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2621 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2622 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002623 PHI->addIncoming(
2624 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002625 return PHI;
2626}
2627
2628static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2629 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2630 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2631 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2632 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2633 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2634 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2635 };
2636
2637 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2638 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2639 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2640 if (!BB)
2641 return true;
2642 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2643 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2644 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002645 unsigned N = 0;
2646 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2647 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2648 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2649 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2650 ++N;
2651 // Free instructions.
2652 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2653 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2654 continue;
2655 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002656 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002657 }
2658 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002659 };
2660
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002661 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2662 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2663 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002664 return false;
2665
2666 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2667 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2668 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2669 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2670 // testing.
2671 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2672 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2673 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2674 return false;
2675
2676 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2677 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2678 return false;
2679
2680 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2681 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2682 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2683 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2684 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2685 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2686 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2687 //
2688 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2689 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2690 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2691 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2692 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2693 return false;
2694 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2695 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2696 return false;
2697 if (QTB)
2698 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2699 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2700 return false;
2701 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2702 I != E; ++I)
2703 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2704 return false;
2705
2706 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2707 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2708 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2709 ->getCondition();
2710 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2711 ->getCondition();
2712
2713 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2714 PStore->getParent());
2715 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2716 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2717
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002718 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2719
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002720 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2721 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2722
2723 if (InvertPCond)
2724 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2725 if (InvertQCond)
2726 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2727 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2728
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002729 auto *T =
2730 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002731 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2732 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2733 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2734 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2735 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2736 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2737
2738 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2739 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002740
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002741 return true;
2742}
2743
2744static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2745 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2746 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2747 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2748 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2749 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2750 // PBI and QBI.
2751 //
2752 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2753 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2754 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2755 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2756 //
2757 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2758 //
2759 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2760 // / \ | \
2761 // PTB PFB | PFB
2762 // \ / | /
2763 // QBI QBI
2764 // / \ | \
2765 // QTB QFB | QFB
2766 // \ / | /
2767 // PostBB PostBB
2768 //
2769 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2770 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2771 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002772 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002773 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2774 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2775 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2776 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2777 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2778
2779 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2780 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2781 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2782 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2783 InvertPCond = true;
2784 }
2785 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2786 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2787 InvertQCond = true;
2788 }
2789
2790 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2791 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2792 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2793 PTB = nullptr;
2794 if (QTB == PostBB)
2795 QTB = nullptr;
2796
2797 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2798 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2799 // predecessor.
2800 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002801 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002802 };
2803 if (!PostBB ||
2804 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2805 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2806 return false;
2807 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2808 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2809 return false;
2810 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2811 return false;
2812
2813 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2814 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002815 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002816 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2817 if (!BB)
2818 continue;
2819 for (auto &I : *BB)
2820 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2821 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2822 }
2823 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2824 if (!BB)
2825 continue;
2826 for (auto &I : *BB)
2827 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2828 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2829 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002830
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002831 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2832 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2833 // clear what it contains.
2834 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2835
2836 bool Changed = false;
2837 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2838 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2839 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2840 return Changed;
2841}
2842
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002843/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2844/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002845/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2846/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002847static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2848 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002849 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2850 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002851
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002852 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002853 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002854 // this conditional branch redundant.
2855 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2856 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2857 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2858 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2859 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2860 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2861 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002862 BI->setCondition(
2863 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
2864 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002865 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002866
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002867 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2868 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2869 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2870 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002871 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002872 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2873 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2874 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002875 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2876 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2877 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002878 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002879 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002880 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
2881 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002882 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2883 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002884 NewPN->addIncoming(
2885 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
2886 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002887 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002888 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002889 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002890 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002891
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002892 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002893 return true;
2894 }
2895 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002896
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002897 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2898 if (CE->canTrap())
2899 return false;
2900
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002901 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2902 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2903 // merged store at the end.
2904 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2905 return true;
2906
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002907 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002908 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002909 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002910 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2911 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2912 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2913 ++BBI;
2914 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002915 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002916
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002917 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002918 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2919 PBIOp = 0;
2920 BIOp = 0;
2921 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2922 PBIOp = 0;
2923 BIOp = 1;
2924 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2925 PBIOp = 1;
2926 BIOp = 0;
2927 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2928 PBIOp = 1;
2929 BIOp = 1;
2930 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002931 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002932 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002933
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002934 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2935 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2936 // keep getting unwound.
2937 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2938 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002939
2940 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002941 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2942 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002943
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002944 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2945 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2946 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2947
2948 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002949 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002950 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
2951 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002952 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2953 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002954
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002955 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2956 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2957 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2958 if (CE->canTrap())
2959 return false;
2960
2961 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2962 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2963 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2964 if (CE->canTrap())
2965 return false;
2966 }
2967
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002968 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002969 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002970
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002971 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002972 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002973
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002974 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2975 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2976 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2977 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2978 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2979 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2980 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2981 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2982 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2983 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002984 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
2985 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002986 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2987 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002988 }
2989
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002990 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002991
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002992 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2993 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002994
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002995 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2996 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002997 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002998 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002999 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003000
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003001 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3002 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003003 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003004
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003005 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003006 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003007
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003008 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3009 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3010 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3011 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003012
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003013 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3014 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003015 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003016 bool HasWeights =
3017 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3018 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003019 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003020 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3021 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3022 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3023 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003024 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3025 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3026 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003027 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3028 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3029 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003030 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003031 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3032
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003033 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003034 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3035 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003036 }
3037
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003038 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3039 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003040 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003041
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003042 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3043 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3044 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3045 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003046 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003047 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3048 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3049 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3050 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3051 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3052 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3053 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003054 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3055 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003056 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003057 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3058 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3059 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3060 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003061 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003062 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3063 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3064 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3065 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3066 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3067 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3068 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3069 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3070
3071 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3072
3073 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3074 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3075 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3076 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003077 }
3078 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003079
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003080 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3081 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003082
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003083 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3084 // one fewer predecessor.
3085 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003086}
3087
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003088// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3089// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003090// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3091// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3092// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3093static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003094 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3095 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003096 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003097 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3098 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3099 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3100 // successor.
3101 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003102 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003103
3104 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003105 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003106 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3107 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003108 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003109 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003110 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003111 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003112 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3113 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003114 }
3115
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003116 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3117 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3118
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003119 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003120 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003121 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3122 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3123 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003124 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003125 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003126 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3127 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003128 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3129 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3130 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003131 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3132 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003133 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003134 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3135 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3136 // terminator must be unreachable.
3137 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3138 } else {
3139 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3140 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3141 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003142 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003143 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003144 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003145 else
3146 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003147 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003148 }
3149
3150 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3151 return true;
3152}
3153
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003154// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003155// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3156// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3157// unconditional otherwise.
3158static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3159 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3160 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3161 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3162 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3163 return false;
3164
3165 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3166 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003167 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3168 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003169
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003170 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3171 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3172 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3173 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3174 if (HasWeights) {
3175 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3176 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003177 TrueWeight =
3178 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3179 FalseWeight =
3180 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003181 }
3182 }
3183
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003184 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003185 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3186 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003187}
3188
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003189// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003190// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3191// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3192// with
3193// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3194static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3195 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3196 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3197 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3198 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3199 return false;
3200
3201 // Extract the actual blocks.
3202 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3203 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3204
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003205 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003206 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3207 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003208}
3209
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003210/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3211/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003212/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3213/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3214/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3215/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3216/// like:
3217///
3218/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3219/// DEFAULT:
3220/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3221/// br label %end
3222/// end:
3223/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003224///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003225/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3226/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003227static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003228 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3229 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3230 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003231 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003232
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003233 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3234 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003235 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3236 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003237
3238 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3239 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003240
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003241 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3242 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3243 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3244 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003245 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3246 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003247
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003248 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3249 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3250 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003251
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003252 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3253 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3254 // away.
3255 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3256 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3257 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3258 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003259
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003260 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003261 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003262 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3263 }
3264 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003265 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003266 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003267
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003268 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3269 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3270 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003271 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003272 Value *V;
3273 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3274 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3275 else
3276 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003277
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003278 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3279 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3280 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003281 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003282 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003283
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003284 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3285 // the block.
3286 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003287 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003288 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003289 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3290 return false;
3291
3292 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3293 // true in the PHI.
3294 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003295 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003296
3297 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3298 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3299
3300 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3301 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3302 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3303 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3304
3305 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3306 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003307 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3308 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003309 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3310 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3311 if (HasWeights) {
3312 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3313 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3314 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003315 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003316 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3317
3318 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003319 SI->setMetadata(
3320 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3321 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003322 }
3323 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003324 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003325
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003326 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003327 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3328 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3329 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003330 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3331 return true;
3332}
3333
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003334/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003335/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3336/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003337static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3338 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003339 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003340 if (!Cond)
3341 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003342
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003343 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3344 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3345 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003346
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003347 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003348 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3349 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003350 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003351 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3352 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3353 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003354
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003355 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003356 if (!CompVal)
3357 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003358
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003359 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3360 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3361 return false;
3362
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003363 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3364
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003365 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3366 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3367 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3368 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003369
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003370 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003371 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003372 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3373 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003374
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003375 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3376 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3377
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003378 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3379 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003380 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3381 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3382 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003383
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003384 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003385
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003386 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003387 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3388 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003389
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003390 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3391 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3392 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3393 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003394 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3395 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003396 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3397 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003398 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3399
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003400 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003401 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003402 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003403 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003404
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003405 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003406
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003407 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3408 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003409 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003410
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003411 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003412 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003413 BB = NewBB;
3414 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003415
3416 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003417 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3418 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003419 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3420 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003421 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003422
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003423 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003424 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003425
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003426 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3427 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3428 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003429
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003430 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3431 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3432 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003433 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003434 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3435 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003436 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003437 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3438 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003439
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003440 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3441 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003442
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003443 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003444 return true;
3445}
3446
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003447bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003448 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3449 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3450 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3451 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3452 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3453 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003454
3455 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003456}
3457
3458// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3459bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3460 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3461
3462 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3463 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3464 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003465 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003466 while (++I != E)
3467 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3468 return false;
3469
3470 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3471 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3472
3473 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003474 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3475 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003476 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3477 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3478
3479 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3480 // it has other dependents.
3481 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3482 continue;
3483
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003484 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003485 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3486 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3487 continue;
3488
3489 bool isTrivial = true;
3490
3491 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3492 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3493 while (++I != E)
3494 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3495 isTrivial = false;
3496 break;
3497 }
3498
3499 if (isTrivial)
3500 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3501 }
3502
3503 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003504 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3505 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003506
3507 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3508 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3509 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3510 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3511 // to remove them all.
3512 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3513 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3514
3515 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3516 PI != PE;) {
3517 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3518 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3519 }
3520
3521 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3522 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3523 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3524 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3525 // predecessors.
3526 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3527 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3528 }
3529
3530 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3531 if (pred_empty(BB))
3532 BB->eraseFromParent();
3533
3534 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3535}
3536
3537// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3538bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003539 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3540 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003541 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3542 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003543
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003544 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3545 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003546 while (++I != E)
3547 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3548 return false;
3549
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003550 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003551 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3552 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3553 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003554 }
3555
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003556 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3557 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003558 if (LoopHeaders)
3559 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003560 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003561}
3562
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003563static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003564 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3565 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3566 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3567 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3568 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3569 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3570 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3571 // simplified.
3572 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003573 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3574 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003575 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3576 return false;
3577
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003578 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3579 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3580 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3581 return false;
3582
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003583 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003584 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003585 while (++I != E) {
3586 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3587 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003588 return false;
3589
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003590 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3591 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3592 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3593 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3594 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3595 break;
3596 default:
3597 return false;
3598 }
3599 }
3600
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003601 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3602 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003603 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003604 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003605
3606 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3607 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3608 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3609 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3610 // are both EH pads).
3611 if (UnwindDest) {
3612 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3613 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003614 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003615 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003616 I != IE; ++I) {
3617 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003618
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003619 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003620 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003621 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003622 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3623 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3624 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3625 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3626 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3627 // pad being removed.
3628 //
3629 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3630 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3631 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3632 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3633 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3634 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3635
3636 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3637 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3638
3639 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3640 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3641 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3642 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003643 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003644 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003645 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3646 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3647 }
3648 } else {
3649 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3650 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3651 // predecessors with this value.
3652 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3653 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3654 }
3655 }
3656 }
3657
3658 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003659 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003660 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3661 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003662 I != IE;) {
3663 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3664 // being moved to another block.
3665 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3666 if (PN->use_empty())
3667 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3668 // when we erase BB below.
3669 continue;
3670
3671 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3672 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3673 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3674 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3675 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3676 if (pred != BB)
3677 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3678 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3679 }
3680 }
3681
3682 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3683 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3684 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003685 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003686 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003687 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003688 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003689 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003690 }
3691 }
3692
3693 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3694 BB->eraseFromParent();
3695 return true;
3696}
3697
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003698// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3699static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3700 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3701 // with.
3702 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3703 if (!UnwindDest)
3704 return false;
3705
3706 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3707 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3708 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3709 return false;
3710
3711 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3712 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3713 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3714 return false;
3715
3716 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3717 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3718 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3719 // funclet bundle operands.
3720 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3721 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3722 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3723 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3724 // destination.
3725 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3726 RI->eraseFromParent();
3727
3728 return true;
3729}
3730
3731bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003732 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3733 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3734 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3735 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3736 return false;
3737
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003738 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003739 return true;
3740
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003741 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003742 return true;
3743
3744 return false;
3745}
3746
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003747bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003748 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003749 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3750 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003751
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003752 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003753 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3754 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003755 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3756 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003757 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3758 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3759 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3760 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3761 else
3762 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3763 }
3764 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003765
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003766 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003767 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003768 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3769 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3770 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003771 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003772 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003773 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003774
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003775 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003776 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003777 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3778 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003779 if (LoopHeaders)
3780 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003781 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003782
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003783 return true;
3784 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003785
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003786 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3787 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3788 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3789 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3790 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003791
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003792 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3793 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3794 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003795 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003796 return true;
3797 }
3798 return false;
3799}
3800
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003801bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3802 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003803
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003804 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003805
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003806 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3807 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003808 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3809 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003810 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003811 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3812 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3813 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003814 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3815 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003816
3817 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003818 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003819 if (SI->isVolatile())
3820 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003821 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003822 if (LI->isVolatile())
3823 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003824 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003825 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3826 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003827 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003828 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3829 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003830 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3831 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3832 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3833 // default.
3834 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3835 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3836 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3837 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003838 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3839 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003840 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003841 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003842 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3843 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3844 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3845 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003846 }
3847
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003848 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3849 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3850 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003851 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003852 Changed = true;
3853 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003854
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003855 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3856 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003857 if (&BB->front() != UI)
3858 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003859
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003860 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003861 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3862 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003863 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003864 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003865 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3866 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3867 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3868 TI->eraseFromParent();
3869 Changed = true;
3870 }
3871 } else {
3872 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003873 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003874 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3875 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003876 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003877 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3878 Changed = true;
3879 }
3880 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003881 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003882 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
3883 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003884 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003885 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3886 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003887 --i;
3888 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003889 Changed = true;
3890 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003891 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3892 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3893 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3894 Changed = true;
3895 }
3896 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3897 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3898 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3899 Changed = true;
3900 continue;
3901 }
3902
3903 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3904 E = CSI->handler_end();
3905 I != E; ++I) {
3906 if (*I == BB) {
3907 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3908 --I;
3909 --E;
3910 Changed = true;
3911 }
3912 }
3913 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3914 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3915 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3916 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3917 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3918 } else {
3919 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3920 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3921 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3922 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3923 }
3924 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3925 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3926 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3927 Changed = true;
3928 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003929 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003930 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3931 TI->eraseFromParent();
3932 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003933 }
3934 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003935
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003936 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003937 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003938 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3939 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003940 if (LoopHeaders)
3941 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003942 return true;
3943 }
3944
3945 return Changed;
3946}
3947
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003948static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3949 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3950
3951 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3952 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3953 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3954 return false;
3955 }
3956 return true;
3957}
3958
3959/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3960/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003961static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003962 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003963
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003964 bool HasDefault =
3965 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003966
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003967 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3968 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3969 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003970 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3971 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003972
3973 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3974 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003975 if (!DestA)
3976 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003977 if (Dest == DestA) {
3978 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3979 continue;
3980 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003981 if (!DestB)
3982 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003983 if (Dest == DestB) {
3984 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3985 continue;
3986 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003987 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003988 }
3989
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003990 assert(DestA && DestB &&
3991 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003992 assert(DestA != DestB);
3993 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3994 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3995 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3996
3997 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3998 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3999 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4000 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4001 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4002 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4003 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4004 OtherDest = DestB;
4005 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4006 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4007 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4008 OtherDest = DestA;
4009 } else
4010 return false;
4011
4012 // Start building the compare and branch.
4013
4014 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004015 Constant *NumCases =
4016 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004017
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004018 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4019 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004020 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4021
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004022 Value *Cmp;
4023 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004024 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004025 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4026 else
4027 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004028 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004029
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004030 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004031 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4032 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004033 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4034 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004035 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4036 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4037 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4038 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4039 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4040 else
4041 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4042 }
4043 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4044 TrueWeight /= 2;
4045 FalseWeight /= 2;
4046 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004047 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004048 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4049 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4050 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004051 }
4052 }
4053
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004054 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4055 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4056 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004057 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4058 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004059 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004060 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4061 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004062 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4063 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004064 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4065 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004066 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4067 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4068 }
4069
4070 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004071 SI->eraseFromParent();
4072
4073 return true;
4074}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004075
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004076/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004077/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004078static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4079 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004080 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004081 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004082 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004083 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004084
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004085 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4086 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4087 // bits are in the condition value.
4088 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
4089 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4090
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004091 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004092 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004093 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004094 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4095 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4096 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004097 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004098 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004099 }
4100 }
4101
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004102 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4103 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004104 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4105 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004106 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004107 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4108 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4109 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004110 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004111 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004112 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004113 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004114 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004115 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4116 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004117 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4118 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004119 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4120 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4121 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4122 return true;
4123 }
4124
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004125 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4126 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4127 if (HasWeight) {
4128 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4129 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4130 }
4131
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004132 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004133 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4134 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004135 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004136 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004137 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004138 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004139 Weights.pop_back();
4140 }
4141
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004142 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004143 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004144 SI->removeCase(Case);
4145 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004146 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004147 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4148 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004149 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4150 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004151 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004152
4153 return !DeadCases.empty();
4154}
4155
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004156/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4157/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004158/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4159/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4160/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4161static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004162 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004163 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004164 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004165 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004166 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004167
4168 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4169 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004170 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004171
4172 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4173
4174 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4175 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4176 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4177 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4178
4179 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004180 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4181 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004182
4183 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4184 return PHI;
4185 }
4186
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004187 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004188}
4189
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004190/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4191/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4192/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004193/// Returns true if a change is made.
4194static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004195 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004196 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4197
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004198 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4199 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004200 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4201 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004202
4203 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004204 PHINode *PHI =
4205 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4206 if (!PHI)
4207 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004208
4209 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4210 }
4211
4212 bool Changed = false;
4213
4214 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004215 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4216 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004217 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004218 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004219
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004220 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4221 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004222
4223 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4224 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4225 Changed = true;
4226 }
4227
4228 return Changed;
4229}
4230
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004231/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004232/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00004233static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004234 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4235 return false;
4236 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4237 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004238
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004239 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
4240 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
4241
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004242 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
4243 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
4244 isa<UndefValue>(C);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004245}
4246
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004247/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004248/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004249static Constant *
4250LookupConstant(Value *V,
4251 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004252 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4253 return C;
4254 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4255}
4256
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004257/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004258/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4259/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004260/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004261static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004262ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4263 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004264 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004265 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4266 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004267 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004268 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4269 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4270 if (A->isNullValue())
4271 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004272 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004273 }
4274
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004275 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4276 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4277 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4278 COps.push_back(A);
4279 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004280 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004281 }
4282
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004283 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004284 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4285 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004286 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004287
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004288 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004289}
4290
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004291/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004292/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004293/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004294/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004295static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004296GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004297 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004298 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4299 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004300 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4301 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4302
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004303 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4304 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004305 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004306 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4307 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4308 ++I) {
4309 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4310 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4311 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4312 return false;
4313 Pred = CaseDest;
4314 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4315 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4316 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4317 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004318 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004319 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004320
4321 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4322 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4323 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4324 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4325 User *User = Use.getUser();
4326 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4327 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4328 continue;
4329 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4330 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4331 continue;
4332 return false;
4333 }
4334
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004335 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004336 } else {
4337 break;
4338 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004339 }
4340
4341 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4342 if (!*CommonDest)
4343 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4344 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4345 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4346 return false;
4347
4348 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4349 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4350 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4351 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4352 if (Idx == -1)
4353 continue;
4354
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004355 Constant *ConstVal =
4356 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004357 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004358 return false;
4359
4360 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4361 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4362 return false;
4363
4364 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4365 }
4366
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004367 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004368}
4369
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004370// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4371// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004372static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004373 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4374 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004375 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4376 if (I.first == Result) {
4377 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4378 return;
4379 }
4380 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004381 UniqueResults.push_back(
4382 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004383}
4384
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004385// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004386// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4387// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4388// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004389static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4390 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4391 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4392 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4393 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004394 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4395 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4396
4397 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4398 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4399 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4400 DL))
4401 return false;
4402
4403 // Only one value per case is permitted
4404 if (Results.size() > 1)
4405 return false;
4406 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4407
4408 // Check the PHI consistency.
4409 if (!PHI)
4410 PHI = Results[0].first;
4411 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4412 return false;
4413 }
4414 // Find the default result value.
4415 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4416 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4417 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4418 DL);
4419 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4420 // is unreachable.
4421 DefaultResult =
4422 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4423 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004424 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004425 return false;
4426
4427 return true;
4428}
4429
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004430// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4431// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004432// Example:
4433// switch (a) {
4434// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4435// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4436// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4437// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4438// default:
4439// return 4;
4440// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004441static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4442 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4443 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004444 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004445 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004446 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4447 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4448 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4449 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4450 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4451 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4452
4453 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4454 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4455 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4456 Value *const ValueCompare =
4457 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4458 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4459 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4460 }
4461 Value *const ValueCompare =
4462 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004463 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4464 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004465 }
4466
4467 return nullptr;
4468}
4469
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004470// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4471// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004472static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4473 Value *SelectValue,
4474 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4475 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4476 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4477 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4478 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4479
4480 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4481
4482 // Remove the switch.
4483 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4484 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4485
4486 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4487 continue;
4488 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4489 }
4490 SI->eraseFromParent();
4491}
4492
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004493/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004494/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4495/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4496static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004497 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004498 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4499 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4500 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4501 Constant *DefaultResult;
4502 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4503 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004504 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4505 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004506 return false;
4507 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4508 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4509 return false;
4510 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4511
4512 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004513 Value *SelectValue =
4514 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004515 if (SelectValue) {
4516 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4517 return true;
4518 }
4519 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4520 return false;
4521}
4522
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004523namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004524/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4525class SwitchLookupTable {
4526public:
4527 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4528 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4529 SwitchLookupTable(
4530 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4531 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4532 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004533
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004534 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4535 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4536 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004537
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004538 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4539 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4540 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4541 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004542
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004543private:
4544 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4545 // different ways.
4546 enum {
4547 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4548 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4549 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004550
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004551 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4552 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4553 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4554 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004555
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004556 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4557 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4558 // shift and mask operations.
4559 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004560
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004561 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4562 // instructions from the table.
4563 ArrayKind
4564 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004565
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004566 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4567 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004568
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004569 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4570 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4571 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004572
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004573 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4574 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4575 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004576
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004577 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4578 GlobalVariable *Array;
4579};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004580}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004581
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004582SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4583 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4584 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4585 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004586 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004587 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004588 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4589 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004590
4591 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004592 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004593
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004594 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4595
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004596 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004597 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004598 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4599 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4600 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004601 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004602
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004603 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004604 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4605
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004606 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004607 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004608 }
4609
4610 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004611 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004612 assert(DefaultValue &&
4613 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004614 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004615 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4616 if (!TableContents[I])
4617 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004618 }
4619
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004620 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004621 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004622 }
4623
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004624 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4625 // that single value.
4626 if (SingleValue) {
4627 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4628 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004629 }
4630
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004631 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4632 // table index.
4633 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4634 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4635 APInt PrevVal;
4636 APInt DistToPrev;
4637 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4638 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4639 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4640 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4641 if (!ConstVal) {
4642 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4643 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4644 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4645 break;
4646 }
4647 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4648 if (I != 0) {
4649 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4650 if (I == 1) {
4651 DistToPrev = Dist;
4652 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4653 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4654 break;
4655 }
4656 }
4657 PrevVal = Val;
4658 }
4659 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4660 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4661 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4662 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4663 ++NumLinearMaps;
4664 return;
4665 }
4666 }
4667
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004668 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004669 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004670 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004671 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4672 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4673 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004674 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4675 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4676 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4677 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4678 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004679 }
4680 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4681 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4682 Kind = BitMapKind;
4683 ++NumBitMaps;
4684 return;
4685 }
4686
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004687 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004688 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004689 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4690
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004691 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4692 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004693 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004694 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004695 Kind = ArrayKind;
4696}
4697
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004698Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004699 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004700 case SingleValueKind:
4701 return SingleValue;
4702 case LinearMapKind: {
4703 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4704 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4705 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4706 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4707 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4708 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4709 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4710 return Result;
4711 }
4712 case BitMapKind: {
4713 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4714 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004715
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004716 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4717 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4718 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4719 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004720
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004721 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4722 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4723 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4724 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004725
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004726 // Shift down.
4727 Value *DownShifted =
4728 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4729 // Mask off.
4730 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4731 }
4732 case ArrayKind: {
4733 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4734 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4735 uint64_t TableSize =
4736 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4737 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4738 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4739 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4740 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004741
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004742 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
4743 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4744 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
4745 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4746 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004747 }
4748 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4749}
4750
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004751bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004752 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004753 Type *ElementType) {
4754 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004755 if (!IT)
4756 return false;
4757 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4758 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004759
4760 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004761 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004762 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004763 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004764}
4765
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004766/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4767/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004768static bool
4769ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4770 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4771 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004772 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4773 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004774
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004775 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004776 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004777 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4778 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004779
4780 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004781 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004782
4783 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004784 AllTablesFitInRegister =
4785 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
4786 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004787
4788 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4789 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4790 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4791 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004792 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004793 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004794
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004795 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4796 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4797 return true;
4798
4799 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4800 if (HasIllegalType)
4801 return false;
4802
4803 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4804 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4805 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4806 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004807}
4808
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004809/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4810/// \code
4811/// if (idx < tablesize)
4812/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4813/// else
4814/// r = default_value;
4815/// if (r != default_value)
4816/// ...
4817/// \endcode
4818/// Is optimized to:
4819/// \code
4820/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4821/// if (cond)
4822/// r = table[idx];
4823/// else
4824/// r = default_value;
4825/// if (cond)
4826/// ...
4827/// \endcode
4828/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004829static void reuseTableCompare(
4830 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
4831 Constant *DefaultValue,
4832 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004833
4834 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4835 if (!CmpInst)
4836 return;
4837
4838 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4839 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4840 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4841 return;
4842
4843 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4844 if (!CmpOp1)
4845 return;
4846
4847 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4848 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4849 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4850
4851 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4852 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4853 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4854 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4855 return;
4856
4857 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4858 // compare result.
4859 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4860 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004861 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004862 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4863 return;
4864 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4865 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4866 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004867
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004868 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4869 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4870 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4871 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4872 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4873 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4874 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4875 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4876 return;
4877 }
4878
4879 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4880 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4881 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4882 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4883 } else {
4884 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004885 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
4886 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4887 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004888 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4889 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4890 }
4891}
4892
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004893/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4894/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4895/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004896static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4897 const DataLayout &DL,
4898 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004899 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004900
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004901 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004902 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004903 return false;
4904
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004905 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4906 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4907
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004908 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4909 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4910 // string and lookup indices into that.
4911
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004912 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
4913 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004914 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4915 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004916 return false;
4917
4918 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004919 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004920 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4921 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4922 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4923 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4924
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004925 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004926 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
4927 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4928 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
4929 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
4930 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004931
4932 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4933 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4934 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4935 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4936 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4937 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4938
4939 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004940 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004941 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004942 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004943 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004944 return false;
4945
4946 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004947 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4948 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4949 Constant *Value = I.second;
4950 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4951 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4952 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004953 }
4954 }
4955
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004956 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004957 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004958 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4959 }
4960
4961 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4962 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4963 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4964 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4965
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004966 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4967 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004968 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004969 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004970 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004971
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004972 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4973 if (NeedMask) {
4974 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004975 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004976 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004977 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004978 return false;
4979 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004980
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004981 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4982 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4983 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004984 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004985 }
4986
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004987 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004988 return false;
4989
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004990 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004991 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004992 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
4993 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004994
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004995 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004996 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004997 Value *TableIndex =
4998 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004999
5000 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5001 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005002 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005003 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005004 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5005 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5006 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5007
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005008 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5009 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5010 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5011 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5012 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5013 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005014 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5015
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005016 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005017 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005018 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5019 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005020 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005021 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5022 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5023 RangeCheckBranch =
5024 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005025 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005026
5027 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5028 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005029
5030 if (NeedMask) {
5031 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5032 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5033 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5034 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5035 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005036 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5037 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005038
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005039 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5040 // unnecessary illegal types.
5041 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5042 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5043 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005044 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005045 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5046 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005047 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5048 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005049 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5050 }
5051 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5052
5053 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5054 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5055 // else continue with table lookup.
5056 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005057 Value *MaskIndex =
5058 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5059 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5060 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5061 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005062 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5063
5064 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5065 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5066 }
5067
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005068 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5069 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5070 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5071 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5072 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5073 }
5074
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005075 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005076 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5077 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005078 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005079
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005080 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5081 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005082 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005083
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005084 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005085
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005086 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5087 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005088 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5089 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005090 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5091 ReturnedEarly = true;
5092 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005093 }
5094
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005095 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5096 // possible.
5097 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5098 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5099 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5100 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5101 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5102 }
5103 }
5104
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005105 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005106 }
5107
5108 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5109 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5110
5111 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005112 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005113 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005114
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005115 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005116 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005117 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5118 }
5119 SI->eraseFromParent();
5120
5121 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005122 if (NeedMask)
5123 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005124 return true;
5125}
5126
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005127static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5128 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5129 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5130 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5131 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5132 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5133 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005134
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005135 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5136}
5137
5138// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5139// of cases.
5140//
5141// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5142// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5143//
5144// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5145// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5146static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5147 const DataLayout &DL,
5148 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5149 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5150 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5151 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5152 return false;
5153 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5154 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5155 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5156 return false;
5157
5158 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5159 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5160 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5161 // as signed.
5162 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5163 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5164 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5165 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5166
5167 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5168 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5169 return false;
5170
5171 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5172 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5173 for (auto &V : Values)
5174 V -= Base;
5175
5176 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5177 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5178 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5179 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5180 for (auto &V : Values)
5181 GCD = llvm::GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
5182
5183 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5184 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5185 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5186 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5187 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5188 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5189 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5190 // as the key function.
5191 if (GCD <= 1 || !llvm::isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
5192 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5193 return false;
5194
5195 unsigned Shift = llvm::Log2_64(GCD);
5196 for (auto &V : Values)
5197 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5198
5199 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5200 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5201 return false;
5202
5203 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5204 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5205 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5206 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5207 //
5208 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5209 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5210 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5211 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005212
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005213 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5214 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5215 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5216 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005217 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5218 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5219 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005220 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5221
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005222 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5223 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005224 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5225 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005226 C.setValue(
5227 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005228 }
5229 return true;
5230}
5231
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005232bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005233 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5234
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005235 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5236 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5237 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5238 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5239 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005240 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005241
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005242 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5243 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5244 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005245 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005246
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005247 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5248 // away into any preds.
5249 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5250 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5251 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5252 ++BBI;
5253 if (SI == &*BBI)
5254 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005255 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005256 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005257
5258 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005259 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005260 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005261
5262 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005263 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5264 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005265
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005266 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
5267 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005268
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005269 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005270 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005271
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005272 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5273 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005274
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005275 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5276 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5277
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005278 return false;
5279}
5280
5281bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5282 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5283 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005284
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005285 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5286 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5287 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5288 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005289 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005290 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5291 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005292 --i;
5293 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005294 Changed = true;
5295 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005296 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005297
5298 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5299 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5300 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5301 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5302 return true;
5303 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005304
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005305 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5306 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5307 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5308 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5309 return true;
5310 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005311
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005312 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5313 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005314 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005315 }
5316 return Changed;
5317}
5318
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005319/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5320/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5321/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5322/// a shared handler.
5323///
5324/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5325/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5326/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5327/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5328/// sinking in this file)
5329///
5330/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5331/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5332/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5333/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5334/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5335/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5336///
5337/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5338/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5339/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5340static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5341 BasicBlock *BB) {
5342 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5343 assert(Succ);
5344 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5345 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5346 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5347 return false;
5348
5349 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5350 if (BB == OtherPred)
5351 continue;
5352 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5353 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5354 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5355 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005356 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5357 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005358 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5359 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5360 continue;
5361
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005362 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005363 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5364 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5365 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5366 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5367 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005368 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5369 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005370 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5371 }
5372
5373 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5374 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005375 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5376 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5377 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005378 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5379 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5380 }
5381
5382 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5383 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5384 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5385 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5386 }
5387
5388 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5389 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5390 BI->eraseFromParent();
5391 return true;
5392 }
5393 return false;
5394}
5395
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005396bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5397 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005398 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005399
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005400 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5401 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005402
5403 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5404 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005405 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5406 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5407 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5408 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005409 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005410 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005411 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005412 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5413 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005414
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005415 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5416 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5417 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5418 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5419 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5420 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005421 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005422 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5423 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005424 return true;
5425 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005426
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005427 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5428 // equivalent.
5429 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005430 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5431 }
5432 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005433 return true;
5434 }
5435
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005436 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5437 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5438 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5439 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005440 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5441 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005442 return false;
5443}
5444
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005445static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5446 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5447 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5448 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5449 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5450 return nullptr;
5451 PredPred = PPred;
5452 }
5453 return PredPred;
5454}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005455
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005456bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005457 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005458
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005459 // Conditional branch
5460 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5461 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5462 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5463 // switch.
5464 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005465 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005466 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005467
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005468 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5469 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5470 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5471 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5472 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5473 ++I;
5474 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005475 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005476 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005477 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005478 ++I;
5479 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5480 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5481 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005482 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005483 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005484 }
5485 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005486
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005487 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005488 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005489 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005490
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005491 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5492 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5493 // of the BI branch.
5494 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5495 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5496 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5497 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5498 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5499 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5500 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5501 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5502 if (Implication) {
5503 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5504 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5505 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5506 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5507 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5508 BI->setCondition(CI);
5509 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5510 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5511 }
5512 }
5513 }
5514
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005515 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5516 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5517 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005518 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5519 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005520
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005521 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5522 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5523 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5524 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005525 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5526 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005527 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5528 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005529 } else {
5530 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005531 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005532 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5533 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5534 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005535 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5536 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005537 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005538 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005539 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005540 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005541 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5542 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5543 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005544 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5545 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005546 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005547
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005548 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5549 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5550 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5551 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005552 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005553 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005554
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005555 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005556 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5557 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005558 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005559 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005560 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005561
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005562 // Look for diamond patterns.
5563 if (MergeCondStores)
5564 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5565 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5566 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5567 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5568 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005569
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005570 return false;
5571}
5572
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005573/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5574static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5575 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5576 if (!C)
5577 return false;
5578
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005579 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005580 return false;
5581
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005582 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005583 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005584 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005585
5586 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5587 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005588 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5589 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5590 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5591 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005592 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005593 return false;
5594
5595 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5596 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5597 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5598 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5599
5600 // Look through bitcasts.
5601 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5602 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5603
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005604 // Load from null is undefined.
5605 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005606 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5607 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005608
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005609 // Store to null is undefined.
5610 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005611 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005612 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5613 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005614
5615 // A call to null is undefined.
5616 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5617 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005618 }
5619 return false;
5620}
5621
5622/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005623/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005624static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5625 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5626 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5627 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5628 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5629 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5630 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5631 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5632 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5633 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5634 // destination from conditional branches.
5635 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5636 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5637 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005638 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5639 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005640 BI->eraseFromParent();
5641 return true;
5642 }
5643 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5644 }
5645
5646 return false;
5647}
5648
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005649bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005650 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005651
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005652 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005653 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005654
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005655 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5656 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005657 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005658 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005659 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5660 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5661 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005662 }
5663
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005664 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5665 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005666 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005667
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005668 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5669 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5670
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005671 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5672 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5673
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005674 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5675 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5676 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5677 //
5678 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5679 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005680
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005681 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5682
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005683 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5684 // eliminate it, do so now.
5685 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5686 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005687 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005688
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005689 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005690 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005691 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005692 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5693 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005694 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005695 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5696 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005697 }
5698 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005699 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5700 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005701 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005702 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5703 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005704 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005705 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5706 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5707 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005708 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005709 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5710 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005711 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005712 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5713 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5714 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005715 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005716 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5717 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5718 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005719 }
5720
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005721 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005722}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005723
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005724/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5725/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005726/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5727/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5728///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005729bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005730 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5731 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005732 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005733 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
5734 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005735}